dipti report

62
 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION: BSNL – An Overview Bharat Sanchar Nigam Limited (known as BSNL, India Communications Cor poration Limited  ) is a public sector communications company in India . It is the India’s large st telecommunication company with 24% market share as on March 31, 2008. Its headquarters at Bharat Sanchar Bhawan, Harish Chandra Mathur Lane, Janpath, New Delhi. It has the status of Mini-Ratna - a status assigned to reputed Public Sector companies in India. BSNL is India's oldest and lar ges t Communication Service Provide r (CSP). Currently BSNL has a customer base of 72.34 million (Basic & Mobile telephony). It has footprints throughout India except for the metropolitan cities of Mumbai and New Delhi which are managed by MTNL. As on March 31, 2008 BSNL commanded a customer base of 31.55 million Wire line, 4.58 million CDMA-WLL and 36.21 million GSM Mobile subscr ibers. BSNL's earnings for the Financial Year end ing March 31, 2007 stood at INR 397.15b (US$ 9.67 b) with net profit of INR 78.06b ( US$ 1.90 billion ). Today, BSNL is India's largest Telco and one of the lar gest Public Sector Undertaki ng with estimated market value of $ 100 Billion. The company is planning an IPO with in 6 months to offload 10% to public. 1

Upload: radhe-singh

Post on 30-May-2018

230 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 162

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

BSNL ndash An Overview

Bharat Sanchar Nigam Limited (known as BSNL India

Communications Corporation Limited ) is a public sector

communications company in India It is the Indiarsquos largest

telecommunication company with 24 market share as on March 31

2008 Its headquarters at Bharat Sanchar Bhawan Harish Chandra

Mathur Lane Janpath New Delhi It has the status of Mini-Ratna - a

status assigned to reputed Public Sector companies in India

BSNL is Indias oldest and largest Communication Service Provider

(CSP) Currently BSNL has a customer base of 7234 million (Basic amp

Mobile telephony) It has footprints throughout India except for the

metropolitan cities of Mumbai and New Delhi which are managed by

MTNL As on March 31 2008 BSNL commanded a customer base of

3155 million Wire line 458 million CDMA-WLL and 3621 million GSM

Mobile subscribers BSNLs earnings for the Financial Year ending

March 31 2007 stood at INR 39715b (US$ 967 b) with net profit of

INR 7806b ( US$ 190 billion ) Today BSNL is Indias largest Telco

and one of the largest Public Sector Undertaking with estimated

market value of $ 100 Billion The company is planning an IPO with in

6 months to offload 10 to public

1

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 262

Today it has about 473 million line basic telephone capacity 4

million WLL capacity 4811 Million GSM Capacity more than

37382 fixed exchanges 44966 BTS 3140 Node B ( 3G BTS)

287 Satellite Stations 480196 Rkm of OFC Cable 63730 Rkm of

Microwave Network connecting 602 Districts 7330

citiestowns and 55 Lakhs villages

BSNL is the only service provider making focused efforts and

planned initiatives to bridge the Rural-Urban Digital Divide ICT

sector In fact there is no telecom operator in the country to beat

its reach with its wide network giving services in every nook and

corner of the country and operates across India except Delhi

ampMumbai Whether it is inaccessible areas of siachen glacier and

North-eastern region of the country BSNL serves its customers

with its wide bouquet of telecom services

Figure 11 BSNL Office in Jamshedpur Jharkhand

2

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 362

CHAPTER 2

OBJECTIVES

To be the Lead Telecom Services Provider

To provide quality and reliable fixed telecom service to our

customer and there by increase customers confidence

To provide mobile telephone service of high quality and become no

1 GSM operator in its area of operation

To provide point of interconnection to other service provider as per

their requirement promptly

To facilitate R amp D activity in the country

Contribute towards

1) National Plan Target of 500 million subscriber base for India by

2010

2) Broadband customers base of 20 million in India by 2010 as per

Broadband Policy 2004

3) Providing telephone connection in villages as per government

policy

4) Implementation of Triple play as a regular commercial

proposition

CHAPTER 3

3

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 462

Services Offered By BSNL

1 BSNL (Landline)-Digitalized Public Switched Telephone Network

(PSTN) with a host of Phone Plus value additions

2 BSNL(Broadband)- BSNL launched DataOne broadband service in

January 2005 which shall be extended to 198 cities very shortly The

service is being provided on existing copper infrastructure on ADSL2

technology Subsequently other services such as VPN Multicasting

Video Conferencing Video-on-Demand Broadcast application etc will

be added

3BSNL(Internet)- Keeping the global network of Networks

networked the countrywide Internet Services of BSNL under the brand

name includes Internet dial up Leased line access CLIbased access (no account is required) and DIAS service for web

browsing and E-mail applications

4ISDN- Integrated Service Digital Network Service of BSNL utilizes a

unique digital network providing high speed and high quality voice

data and image transfer over the same line

5 Intelligent Network- Intelligent Network Service (In Service) offers

value-added services such as FPH (Free Phone Service) India

Telephone Card (Prepaid card) etc

4

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 562

6 I-Net- It offers x25 x28 leased x28 Dial up (PSTN) Connection)

and frame relay services

7 Leased Lines amp Datacom- BSNL provides leased lines for voice and

data communication for various application on point to point basis It

offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased data circuits as

well as dial-up lines

8 Cellular Mobile Service- Postpaid and Prepaid BSNLrsquos GSM

cellular mobile service Cellone has a customer base of over 52 million

BSNL Mobile provides all the services like MMS GPRS Voice Mail E-

mail Short Message Service (SMS) both national and international

9 Wireless in Local Loop- communication system that connects

customers to the PSTN using radio frequency signals as a substitute

for conventional wires for all or part of the connection between the

subscribers and the telephone exchange

CHAPTER 4

5

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 662

INTRODUCTION

CALL CENTRE

In a call centre one learns how to patiently listen to customers and

how to efficiently solve their complications One can thus earn quality

job experience and virtue of customer handling which always helps

one in the future

CALL CENTRE is the section which deals with the diverse problems

and queries of the customers Helpline numbers are provided which

the customers can call and discuss and resolve their difficulties

The common helpline numbers are 1500 (queries for latest offers and

schemes activationdeactivation of services provided by the network)

198 (computerized service provided for recording problems related to

the set) 177 (Hindi seva) 2227900 (for problems related to mobiles

exclusively)

6

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 762

41 Services provided by helpline

1 Information

2 Bill enquiry

3 Current meter reading

4 Complaints regarding

a B-phone

b Broadband

c Mobile

d Lease line

e Internet

f Bill

g Complaints

h WLL

5 Status advice note

6Booking of NTC request of shifting amp restoration

7

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 862

For meter Reading Formula used was

TAXINltEntergt

ND=ltTelephone Nogt

Figure 41 Software used for Bill Enquiry

8

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 962

Figure 42 Software used for Outstanding Bill Enquiry

9

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1062

CHAPTER 5

INTRODUCTION

Digital electronic switch -E10B

The E10B is one of the earliest SPC(Stored Program Control) digital

exchanges in the world They were commissioned first in France

sometime in the mid-eighties

The E10B System is a Large Size Multi Service Digital Electronic

Switching System based on Time Division Switching of Digital Signals

The system is used for serving us Local TAX(Trunk Automatic

Exchange) and Tandem Exchanges E10B capacity is 45000

Connections

51 An E 10 B switching center can be divided into 3 main

blocks

Block 1 Subscriber and circuit connections

Block 2 Time- division switching network

Block 3 Control unit

The operation and maintenance centre constitutes a fourth block which

is shared by a number of switching centers

10

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1162

511 BLOCK 1

Subscriber and circuit connections -The interface with the

subscriber lines is via circuit boards comprising 16 ordinary subscriber

equipments or 8 discriminated subscriber equipments After

concentration the analog signals are sampled and encoded to make up

the outgoing PCM signals There are 2 3 or 4 PCM links to cater for

the overall result obtained by calculating the product number of

subscriber X average traffic per subscriber This provides for

concentrating the traffic on 2 3 or 4 PCM links corresponding to a

maximum configuration of 120 circuits

512 BLOCK 2

Time Division Switching Network- It provides 4 wire switching

between the time slot allocated to the calling party and the time slot

allocated to the called party It is a 3 stage system (time - space-

time)

When the ultimate capacity is reached the E 10 B switching network

can handle 384 PCM systems 16 of which can be allocating to

frequency senderreceiver unit (ETA) The remaining 368 PCM systems

provide 368x30 = 11040time slots catering for 5520 simultaneous

calls

11

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1262

513 BLOCK 3

Control Unit- Switching operation that is carried out in block1 and

block2 are monitored by Control Unit So we can say that it is a

Monitoring Unit of E10B

52 Parts of E10B are -

MR (Multiregister) Main Function of MR is Call ProcessingCall are

set up and released by multiregisters There is Min 2 and Max 6 MR

TR (Translator) Contain Routing Data and Charging Data Routing

Data show that the Call is Local STD or ISD and based on that

Charging Data is used that Charges that Callbased on its Pulse

TX (Taxor) After getting the Charging Data from Translator it

charges the Call Two charging units generate the data required for

invoicing subscribers General or detailed billing is prepared as

required by the subscriber On the basis of the rate applicable to a call

as supplied by the translator the charging unit generates and totals

metering pulses which take into account the date time and charging

mode

BTA time base supplies all the timing signals required by the

exchange

12

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 262

Today it has about 473 million line basic telephone capacity 4

million WLL capacity 4811 Million GSM Capacity more than

37382 fixed exchanges 44966 BTS 3140 Node B ( 3G BTS)

287 Satellite Stations 480196 Rkm of OFC Cable 63730 Rkm of

Microwave Network connecting 602 Districts 7330

citiestowns and 55 Lakhs villages

BSNL is the only service provider making focused efforts and

planned initiatives to bridge the Rural-Urban Digital Divide ICT

sector In fact there is no telecom operator in the country to beat

its reach with its wide network giving services in every nook and

corner of the country and operates across India except Delhi

ampMumbai Whether it is inaccessible areas of siachen glacier and

North-eastern region of the country BSNL serves its customers

with its wide bouquet of telecom services

Figure 11 BSNL Office in Jamshedpur Jharkhand

2

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 362

CHAPTER 2

OBJECTIVES

To be the Lead Telecom Services Provider

To provide quality and reliable fixed telecom service to our

customer and there by increase customers confidence

To provide mobile telephone service of high quality and become no

1 GSM operator in its area of operation

To provide point of interconnection to other service provider as per

their requirement promptly

To facilitate R amp D activity in the country

Contribute towards

1) National Plan Target of 500 million subscriber base for India by

2010

2) Broadband customers base of 20 million in India by 2010 as per

Broadband Policy 2004

3) Providing telephone connection in villages as per government

policy

4) Implementation of Triple play as a regular commercial

proposition

CHAPTER 3

3

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 462

Services Offered By BSNL

1 BSNL (Landline)-Digitalized Public Switched Telephone Network

(PSTN) with a host of Phone Plus value additions

2 BSNL(Broadband)- BSNL launched DataOne broadband service in

January 2005 which shall be extended to 198 cities very shortly The

service is being provided on existing copper infrastructure on ADSL2

technology Subsequently other services such as VPN Multicasting

Video Conferencing Video-on-Demand Broadcast application etc will

be added

3BSNL(Internet)- Keeping the global network of Networks

networked the countrywide Internet Services of BSNL under the brand

name includes Internet dial up Leased line access CLIbased access (no account is required) and DIAS service for web

browsing and E-mail applications

4ISDN- Integrated Service Digital Network Service of BSNL utilizes a

unique digital network providing high speed and high quality voice

data and image transfer over the same line

5 Intelligent Network- Intelligent Network Service (In Service) offers

value-added services such as FPH (Free Phone Service) India

Telephone Card (Prepaid card) etc

4

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 562

6 I-Net- It offers x25 x28 leased x28 Dial up (PSTN) Connection)

and frame relay services

7 Leased Lines amp Datacom- BSNL provides leased lines for voice and

data communication for various application on point to point basis It

offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased data circuits as

well as dial-up lines

8 Cellular Mobile Service- Postpaid and Prepaid BSNLrsquos GSM

cellular mobile service Cellone has a customer base of over 52 million

BSNL Mobile provides all the services like MMS GPRS Voice Mail E-

mail Short Message Service (SMS) both national and international

9 Wireless in Local Loop- communication system that connects

customers to the PSTN using radio frequency signals as a substitute

for conventional wires for all or part of the connection between the

subscribers and the telephone exchange

CHAPTER 4

5

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 662

INTRODUCTION

CALL CENTRE

In a call centre one learns how to patiently listen to customers and

how to efficiently solve their complications One can thus earn quality

job experience and virtue of customer handling which always helps

one in the future

CALL CENTRE is the section which deals with the diverse problems

and queries of the customers Helpline numbers are provided which

the customers can call and discuss and resolve their difficulties

The common helpline numbers are 1500 (queries for latest offers and

schemes activationdeactivation of services provided by the network)

198 (computerized service provided for recording problems related to

the set) 177 (Hindi seva) 2227900 (for problems related to mobiles

exclusively)

6

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 762

41 Services provided by helpline

1 Information

2 Bill enquiry

3 Current meter reading

4 Complaints regarding

a B-phone

b Broadband

c Mobile

d Lease line

e Internet

f Bill

g Complaints

h WLL

5 Status advice note

6Booking of NTC request of shifting amp restoration

7

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 862

For meter Reading Formula used was

TAXINltEntergt

ND=ltTelephone Nogt

Figure 41 Software used for Bill Enquiry

8

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 962

Figure 42 Software used for Outstanding Bill Enquiry

9

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1062

CHAPTER 5

INTRODUCTION

Digital electronic switch -E10B

The E10B is one of the earliest SPC(Stored Program Control) digital

exchanges in the world They were commissioned first in France

sometime in the mid-eighties

The E10B System is a Large Size Multi Service Digital Electronic

Switching System based on Time Division Switching of Digital Signals

The system is used for serving us Local TAX(Trunk Automatic

Exchange) and Tandem Exchanges E10B capacity is 45000

Connections

51 An E 10 B switching center can be divided into 3 main

blocks

Block 1 Subscriber and circuit connections

Block 2 Time- division switching network

Block 3 Control unit

The operation and maintenance centre constitutes a fourth block which

is shared by a number of switching centers

10

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1162

511 BLOCK 1

Subscriber and circuit connections -The interface with the

subscriber lines is via circuit boards comprising 16 ordinary subscriber

equipments or 8 discriminated subscriber equipments After

concentration the analog signals are sampled and encoded to make up

the outgoing PCM signals There are 2 3 or 4 PCM links to cater for

the overall result obtained by calculating the product number of

subscriber X average traffic per subscriber This provides for

concentrating the traffic on 2 3 or 4 PCM links corresponding to a

maximum configuration of 120 circuits

512 BLOCK 2

Time Division Switching Network- It provides 4 wire switching

between the time slot allocated to the calling party and the time slot

allocated to the called party It is a 3 stage system (time - space-

time)

When the ultimate capacity is reached the E 10 B switching network

can handle 384 PCM systems 16 of which can be allocating to

frequency senderreceiver unit (ETA) The remaining 368 PCM systems

provide 368x30 = 11040time slots catering for 5520 simultaneous

calls

11

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1262

513 BLOCK 3

Control Unit- Switching operation that is carried out in block1 and

block2 are monitored by Control Unit So we can say that it is a

Monitoring Unit of E10B

52 Parts of E10B are -

MR (Multiregister) Main Function of MR is Call ProcessingCall are

set up and released by multiregisters There is Min 2 and Max 6 MR

TR (Translator) Contain Routing Data and Charging Data Routing

Data show that the Call is Local STD or ISD and based on that

Charging Data is used that Charges that Callbased on its Pulse

TX (Taxor) After getting the Charging Data from Translator it

charges the Call Two charging units generate the data required for

invoicing subscribers General or detailed billing is prepared as

required by the subscriber On the basis of the rate applicable to a call

as supplied by the translator the charging unit generates and totals

metering pulses which take into account the date time and charging

mode

BTA time base supplies all the timing signals required by the

exchange

12

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 362

CHAPTER 2

OBJECTIVES

To be the Lead Telecom Services Provider

To provide quality and reliable fixed telecom service to our

customer and there by increase customers confidence

To provide mobile telephone service of high quality and become no

1 GSM operator in its area of operation

To provide point of interconnection to other service provider as per

their requirement promptly

To facilitate R amp D activity in the country

Contribute towards

1) National Plan Target of 500 million subscriber base for India by

2010

2) Broadband customers base of 20 million in India by 2010 as per

Broadband Policy 2004

3) Providing telephone connection in villages as per government

policy

4) Implementation of Triple play as a regular commercial

proposition

CHAPTER 3

3

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 462

Services Offered By BSNL

1 BSNL (Landline)-Digitalized Public Switched Telephone Network

(PSTN) with a host of Phone Plus value additions

2 BSNL(Broadband)- BSNL launched DataOne broadband service in

January 2005 which shall be extended to 198 cities very shortly The

service is being provided on existing copper infrastructure on ADSL2

technology Subsequently other services such as VPN Multicasting

Video Conferencing Video-on-Demand Broadcast application etc will

be added

3BSNL(Internet)- Keeping the global network of Networks

networked the countrywide Internet Services of BSNL under the brand

name includes Internet dial up Leased line access CLIbased access (no account is required) and DIAS service for web

browsing and E-mail applications

4ISDN- Integrated Service Digital Network Service of BSNL utilizes a

unique digital network providing high speed and high quality voice

data and image transfer over the same line

5 Intelligent Network- Intelligent Network Service (In Service) offers

value-added services such as FPH (Free Phone Service) India

Telephone Card (Prepaid card) etc

4

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 562

6 I-Net- It offers x25 x28 leased x28 Dial up (PSTN) Connection)

and frame relay services

7 Leased Lines amp Datacom- BSNL provides leased lines for voice and

data communication for various application on point to point basis It

offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased data circuits as

well as dial-up lines

8 Cellular Mobile Service- Postpaid and Prepaid BSNLrsquos GSM

cellular mobile service Cellone has a customer base of over 52 million

BSNL Mobile provides all the services like MMS GPRS Voice Mail E-

mail Short Message Service (SMS) both national and international

9 Wireless in Local Loop- communication system that connects

customers to the PSTN using radio frequency signals as a substitute

for conventional wires for all or part of the connection between the

subscribers and the telephone exchange

CHAPTER 4

5

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 662

INTRODUCTION

CALL CENTRE

In a call centre one learns how to patiently listen to customers and

how to efficiently solve their complications One can thus earn quality

job experience and virtue of customer handling which always helps

one in the future

CALL CENTRE is the section which deals with the diverse problems

and queries of the customers Helpline numbers are provided which

the customers can call and discuss and resolve their difficulties

The common helpline numbers are 1500 (queries for latest offers and

schemes activationdeactivation of services provided by the network)

198 (computerized service provided for recording problems related to

the set) 177 (Hindi seva) 2227900 (for problems related to mobiles

exclusively)

6

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 762

41 Services provided by helpline

1 Information

2 Bill enquiry

3 Current meter reading

4 Complaints regarding

a B-phone

b Broadband

c Mobile

d Lease line

e Internet

f Bill

g Complaints

h WLL

5 Status advice note

6Booking of NTC request of shifting amp restoration

7

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 862

For meter Reading Formula used was

TAXINltEntergt

ND=ltTelephone Nogt

Figure 41 Software used for Bill Enquiry

8

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 962

Figure 42 Software used for Outstanding Bill Enquiry

9

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1062

CHAPTER 5

INTRODUCTION

Digital electronic switch -E10B

The E10B is one of the earliest SPC(Stored Program Control) digital

exchanges in the world They were commissioned first in France

sometime in the mid-eighties

The E10B System is a Large Size Multi Service Digital Electronic

Switching System based on Time Division Switching of Digital Signals

The system is used for serving us Local TAX(Trunk Automatic

Exchange) and Tandem Exchanges E10B capacity is 45000

Connections

51 An E 10 B switching center can be divided into 3 main

blocks

Block 1 Subscriber and circuit connections

Block 2 Time- division switching network

Block 3 Control unit

The operation and maintenance centre constitutes a fourth block which

is shared by a number of switching centers

10

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1162

511 BLOCK 1

Subscriber and circuit connections -The interface with the

subscriber lines is via circuit boards comprising 16 ordinary subscriber

equipments or 8 discriminated subscriber equipments After

concentration the analog signals are sampled and encoded to make up

the outgoing PCM signals There are 2 3 or 4 PCM links to cater for

the overall result obtained by calculating the product number of

subscriber X average traffic per subscriber This provides for

concentrating the traffic on 2 3 or 4 PCM links corresponding to a

maximum configuration of 120 circuits

512 BLOCK 2

Time Division Switching Network- It provides 4 wire switching

between the time slot allocated to the calling party and the time slot

allocated to the called party It is a 3 stage system (time - space-

time)

When the ultimate capacity is reached the E 10 B switching network

can handle 384 PCM systems 16 of which can be allocating to

frequency senderreceiver unit (ETA) The remaining 368 PCM systems

provide 368x30 = 11040time slots catering for 5520 simultaneous

calls

11

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1262

513 BLOCK 3

Control Unit- Switching operation that is carried out in block1 and

block2 are monitored by Control Unit So we can say that it is a

Monitoring Unit of E10B

52 Parts of E10B are -

MR (Multiregister) Main Function of MR is Call ProcessingCall are

set up and released by multiregisters There is Min 2 and Max 6 MR

TR (Translator) Contain Routing Data and Charging Data Routing

Data show that the Call is Local STD or ISD and based on that

Charging Data is used that Charges that Callbased on its Pulse

TX (Taxor) After getting the Charging Data from Translator it

charges the Call Two charging units generate the data required for

invoicing subscribers General or detailed billing is prepared as

required by the subscriber On the basis of the rate applicable to a call

as supplied by the translator the charging unit generates and totals

metering pulses which take into account the date time and charging

mode

BTA time base supplies all the timing signals required by the

exchange

12

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 462

Services Offered By BSNL

1 BSNL (Landline)-Digitalized Public Switched Telephone Network

(PSTN) with a host of Phone Plus value additions

2 BSNL(Broadband)- BSNL launched DataOne broadband service in

January 2005 which shall be extended to 198 cities very shortly The

service is being provided on existing copper infrastructure on ADSL2

technology Subsequently other services such as VPN Multicasting

Video Conferencing Video-on-Demand Broadcast application etc will

be added

3BSNL(Internet)- Keeping the global network of Networks

networked the countrywide Internet Services of BSNL under the brand

name includes Internet dial up Leased line access CLIbased access (no account is required) and DIAS service for web

browsing and E-mail applications

4ISDN- Integrated Service Digital Network Service of BSNL utilizes a

unique digital network providing high speed and high quality voice

data and image transfer over the same line

5 Intelligent Network- Intelligent Network Service (In Service) offers

value-added services such as FPH (Free Phone Service) India

Telephone Card (Prepaid card) etc

4

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 562

6 I-Net- It offers x25 x28 leased x28 Dial up (PSTN) Connection)

and frame relay services

7 Leased Lines amp Datacom- BSNL provides leased lines for voice and

data communication for various application on point to point basis It

offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased data circuits as

well as dial-up lines

8 Cellular Mobile Service- Postpaid and Prepaid BSNLrsquos GSM

cellular mobile service Cellone has a customer base of over 52 million

BSNL Mobile provides all the services like MMS GPRS Voice Mail E-

mail Short Message Service (SMS) both national and international

9 Wireless in Local Loop- communication system that connects

customers to the PSTN using radio frequency signals as a substitute

for conventional wires for all or part of the connection between the

subscribers and the telephone exchange

CHAPTER 4

5

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 662

INTRODUCTION

CALL CENTRE

In a call centre one learns how to patiently listen to customers and

how to efficiently solve their complications One can thus earn quality

job experience and virtue of customer handling which always helps

one in the future

CALL CENTRE is the section which deals with the diverse problems

and queries of the customers Helpline numbers are provided which

the customers can call and discuss and resolve their difficulties

The common helpline numbers are 1500 (queries for latest offers and

schemes activationdeactivation of services provided by the network)

198 (computerized service provided for recording problems related to

the set) 177 (Hindi seva) 2227900 (for problems related to mobiles

exclusively)

6

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 762

41 Services provided by helpline

1 Information

2 Bill enquiry

3 Current meter reading

4 Complaints regarding

a B-phone

b Broadband

c Mobile

d Lease line

e Internet

f Bill

g Complaints

h WLL

5 Status advice note

6Booking of NTC request of shifting amp restoration

7

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 862

For meter Reading Formula used was

TAXINltEntergt

ND=ltTelephone Nogt

Figure 41 Software used for Bill Enquiry

8

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 962

Figure 42 Software used for Outstanding Bill Enquiry

9

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1062

CHAPTER 5

INTRODUCTION

Digital electronic switch -E10B

The E10B is one of the earliest SPC(Stored Program Control) digital

exchanges in the world They were commissioned first in France

sometime in the mid-eighties

The E10B System is a Large Size Multi Service Digital Electronic

Switching System based on Time Division Switching of Digital Signals

The system is used for serving us Local TAX(Trunk Automatic

Exchange) and Tandem Exchanges E10B capacity is 45000

Connections

51 An E 10 B switching center can be divided into 3 main

blocks

Block 1 Subscriber and circuit connections

Block 2 Time- division switching network

Block 3 Control unit

The operation and maintenance centre constitutes a fourth block which

is shared by a number of switching centers

10

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1162

511 BLOCK 1

Subscriber and circuit connections -The interface with the

subscriber lines is via circuit boards comprising 16 ordinary subscriber

equipments or 8 discriminated subscriber equipments After

concentration the analog signals are sampled and encoded to make up

the outgoing PCM signals There are 2 3 or 4 PCM links to cater for

the overall result obtained by calculating the product number of

subscriber X average traffic per subscriber This provides for

concentrating the traffic on 2 3 or 4 PCM links corresponding to a

maximum configuration of 120 circuits

512 BLOCK 2

Time Division Switching Network- It provides 4 wire switching

between the time slot allocated to the calling party and the time slot

allocated to the called party It is a 3 stage system (time - space-

time)

When the ultimate capacity is reached the E 10 B switching network

can handle 384 PCM systems 16 of which can be allocating to

frequency senderreceiver unit (ETA) The remaining 368 PCM systems

provide 368x30 = 11040time slots catering for 5520 simultaneous

calls

11

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1262

513 BLOCK 3

Control Unit- Switching operation that is carried out in block1 and

block2 are monitored by Control Unit So we can say that it is a

Monitoring Unit of E10B

52 Parts of E10B are -

MR (Multiregister) Main Function of MR is Call ProcessingCall are

set up and released by multiregisters There is Min 2 and Max 6 MR

TR (Translator) Contain Routing Data and Charging Data Routing

Data show that the Call is Local STD or ISD and based on that

Charging Data is used that Charges that Callbased on its Pulse

TX (Taxor) After getting the Charging Data from Translator it

charges the Call Two charging units generate the data required for

invoicing subscribers General or detailed billing is prepared as

required by the subscriber On the basis of the rate applicable to a call

as supplied by the translator the charging unit generates and totals

metering pulses which take into account the date time and charging

mode

BTA time base supplies all the timing signals required by the

exchange

12

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 562

6 I-Net- It offers x25 x28 leased x28 Dial up (PSTN) Connection)

and frame relay services

7 Leased Lines amp Datacom- BSNL provides leased lines for voice and

data communication for various application on point to point basis It

offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased data circuits as

well as dial-up lines

8 Cellular Mobile Service- Postpaid and Prepaid BSNLrsquos GSM

cellular mobile service Cellone has a customer base of over 52 million

BSNL Mobile provides all the services like MMS GPRS Voice Mail E-

mail Short Message Service (SMS) both national and international

9 Wireless in Local Loop- communication system that connects

customers to the PSTN using radio frequency signals as a substitute

for conventional wires for all or part of the connection between the

subscribers and the telephone exchange

CHAPTER 4

5

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 662

INTRODUCTION

CALL CENTRE

In a call centre one learns how to patiently listen to customers and

how to efficiently solve their complications One can thus earn quality

job experience and virtue of customer handling which always helps

one in the future

CALL CENTRE is the section which deals with the diverse problems

and queries of the customers Helpline numbers are provided which

the customers can call and discuss and resolve their difficulties

The common helpline numbers are 1500 (queries for latest offers and

schemes activationdeactivation of services provided by the network)

198 (computerized service provided for recording problems related to

the set) 177 (Hindi seva) 2227900 (for problems related to mobiles

exclusively)

6

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 762

41 Services provided by helpline

1 Information

2 Bill enquiry

3 Current meter reading

4 Complaints regarding

a B-phone

b Broadband

c Mobile

d Lease line

e Internet

f Bill

g Complaints

h WLL

5 Status advice note

6Booking of NTC request of shifting amp restoration

7

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 862

For meter Reading Formula used was

TAXINltEntergt

ND=ltTelephone Nogt

Figure 41 Software used for Bill Enquiry

8

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 962

Figure 42 Software used for Outstanding Bill Enquiry

9

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1062

CHAPTER 5

INTRODUCTION

Digital electronic switch -E10B

The E10B is one of the earliest SPC(Stored Program Control) digital

exchanges in the world They were commissioned first in France

sometime in the mid-eighties

The E10B System is a Large Size Multi Service Digital Electronic

Switching System based on Time Division Switching of Digital Signals

The system is used for serving us Local TAX(Trunk Automatic

Exchange) and Tandem Exchanges E10B capacity is 45000

Connections

51 An E 10 B switching center can be divided into 3 main

blocks

Block 1 Subscriber and circuit connections

Block 2 Time- division switching network

Block 3 Control unit

The operation and maintenance centre constitutes a fourth block which

is shared by a number of switching centers

10

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1162

511 BLOCK 1

Subscriber and circuit connections -The interface with the

subscriber lines is via circuit boards comprising 16 ordinary subscriber

equipments or 8 discriminated subscriber equipments After

concentration the analog signals are sampled and encoded to make up

the outgoing PCM signals There are 2 3 or 4 PCM links to cater for

the overall result obtained by calculating the product number of

subscriber X average traffic per subscriber This provides for

concentrating the traffic on 2 3 or 4 PCM links corresponding to a

maximum configuration of 120 circuits

512 BLOCK 2

Time Division Switching Network- It provides 4 wire switching

between the time slot allocated to the calling party and the time slot

allocated to the called party It is a 3 stage system (time - space-

time)

When the ultimate capacity is reached the E 10 B switching network

can handle 384 PCM systems 16 of which can be allocating to

frequency senderreceiver unit (ETA) The remaining 368 PCM systems

provide 368x30 = 11040time slots catering for 5520 simultaneous

calls

11

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1262

513 BLOCK 3

Control Unit- Switching operation that is carried out in block1 and

block2 are monitored by Control Unit So we can say that it is a

Monitoring Unit of E10B

52 Parts of E10B are -

MR (Multiregister) Main Function of MR is Call ProcessingCall are

set up and released by multiregisters There is Min 2 and Max 6 MR

TR (Translator) Contain Routing Data and Charging Data Routing

Data show that the Call is Local STD or ISD and based on that

Charging Data is used that Charges that Callbased on its Pulse

TX (Taxor) After getting the Charging Data from Translator it

charges the Call Two charging units generate the data required for

invoicing subscribers General or detailed billing is prepared as

required by the subscriber On the basis of the rate applicable to a call

as supplied by the translator the charging unit generates and totals

metering pulses which take into account the date time and charging

mode

BTA time base supplies all the timing signals required by the

exchange

12

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 662

INTRODUCTION

CALL CENTRE

In a call centre one learns how to patiently listen to customers and

how to efficiently solve their complications One can thus earn quality

job experience and virtue of customer handling which always helps

one in the future

CALL CENTRE is the section which deals with the diverse problems

and queries of the customers Helpline numbers are provided which

the customers can call and discuss and resolve their difficulties

The common helpline numbers are 1500 (queries for latest offers and

schemes activationdeactivation of services provided by the network)

198 (computerized service provided for recording problems related to

the set) 177 (Hindi seva) 2227900 (for problems related to mobiles

exclusively)

6

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 762

41 Services provided by helpline

1 Information

2 Bill enquiry

3 Current meter reading

4 Complaints regarding

a B-phone

b Broadband

c Mobile

d Lease line

e Internet

f Bill

g Complaints

h WLL

5 Status advice note

6Booking of NTC request of shifting amp restoration

7

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 862

For meter Reading Formula used was

TAXINltEntergt

ND=ltTelephone Nogt

Figure 41 Software used for Bill Enquiry

8

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 962

Figure 42 Software used for Outstanding Bill Enquiry

9

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1062

CHAPTER 5

INTRODUCTION

Digital electronic switch -E10B

The E10B is one of the earliest SPC(Stored Program Control) digital

exchanges in the world They were commissioned first in France

sometime in the mid-eighties

The E10B System is a Large Size Multi Service Digital Electronic

Switching System based on Time Division Switching of Digital Signals

The system is used for serving us Local TAX(Trunk Automatic

Exchange) and Tandem Exchanges E10B capacity is 45000

Connections

51 An E 10 B switching center can be divided into 3 main

blocks

Block 1 Subscriber and circuit connections

Block 2 Time- division switching network

Block 3 Control unit

The operation and maintenance centre constitutes a fourth block which

is shared by a number of switching centers

10

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1162

511 BLOCK 1

Subscriber and circuit connections -The interface with the

subscriber lines is via circuit boards comprising 16 ordinary subscriber

equipments or 8 discriminated subscriber equipments After

concentration the analog signals are sampled and encoded to make up

the outgoing PCM signals There are 2 3 or 4 PCM links to cater for

the overall result obtained by calculating the product number of

subscriber X average traffic per subscriber This provides for

concentrating the traffic on 2 3 or 4 PCM links corresponding to a

maximum configuration of 120 circuits

512 BLOCK 2

Time Division Switching Network- It provides 4 wire switching

between the time slot allocated to the calling party and the time slot

allocated to the called party It is a 3 stage system (time - space-

time)

When the ultimate capacity is reached the E 10 B switching network

can handle 384 PCM systems 16 of which can be allocating to

frequency senderreceiver unit (ETA) The remaining 368 PCM systems

provide 368x30 = 11040time slots catering for 5520 simultaneous

calls

11

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1262

513 BLOCK 3

Control Unit- Switching operation that is carried out in block1 and

block2 are monitored by Control Unit So we can say that it is a

Monitoring Unit of E10B

52 Parts of E10B are -

MR (Multiregister) Main Function of MR is Call ProcessingCall are

set up and released by multiregisters There is Min 2 and Max 6 MR

TR (Translator) Contain Routing Data and Charging Data Routing

Data show that the Call is Local STD or ISD and based on that

Charging Data is used that Charges that Callbased on its Pulse

TX (Taxor) After getting the Charging Data from Translator it

charges the Call Two charging units generate the data required for

invoicing subscribers General or detailed billing is prepared as

required by the subscriber On the basis of the rate applicable to a call

as supplied by the translator the charging unit generates and totals

metering pulses which take into account the date time and charging

mode

BTA time base supplies all the timing signals required by the

exchange

12

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 762

41 Services provided by helpline

1 Information

2 Bill enquiry

3 Current meter reading

4 Complaints regarding

a B-phone

b Broadband

c Mobile

d Lease line

e Internet

f Bill

g Complaints

h WLL

5 Status advice note

6Booking of NTC request of shifting amp restoration

7

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 862

For meter Reading Formula used was

TAXINltEntergt

ND=ltTelephone Nogt

Figure 41 Software used for Bill Enquiry

8

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 962

Figure 42 Software used for Outstanding Bill Enquiry

9

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1062

CHAPTER 5

INTRODUCTION

Digital electronic switch -E10B

The E10B is one of the earliest SPC(Stored Program Control) digital

exchanges in the world They were commissioned first in France

sometime in the mid-eighties

The E10B System is a Large Size Multi Service Digital Electronic

Switching System based on Time Division Switching of Digital Signals

The system is used for serving us Local TAX(Trunk Automatic

Exchange) and Tandem Exchanges E10B capacity is 45000

Connections

51 An E 10 B switching center can be divided into 3 main

blocks

Block 1 Subscriber and circuit connections

Block 2 Time- division switching network

Block 3 Control unit

The operation and maintenance centre constitutes a fourth block which

is shared by a number of switching centers

10

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1162

511 BLOCK 1

Subscriber and circuit connections -The interface with the

subscriber lines is via circuit boards comprising 16 ordinary subscriber

equipments or 8 discriminated subscriber equipments After

concentration the analog signals are sampled and encoded to make up

the outgoing PCM signals There are 2 3 or 4 PCM links to cater for

the overall result obtained by calculating the product number of

subscriber X average traffic per subscriber This provides for

concentrating the traffic on 2 3 or 4 PCM links corresponding to a

maximum configuration of 120 circuits

512 BLOCK 2

Time Division Switching Network- It provides 4 wire switching

between the time slot allocated to the calling party and the time slot

allocated to the called party It is a 3 stage system (time - space-

time)

When the ultimate capacity is reached the E 10 B switching network

can handle 384 PCM systems 16 of which can be allocating to

frequency senderreceiver unit (ETA) The remaining 368 PCM systems

provide 368x30 = 11040time slots catering for 5520 simultaneous

calls

11

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1262

513 BLOCK 3

Control Unit- Switching operation that is carried out in block1 and

block2 are monitored by Control Unit So we can say that it is a

Monitoring Unit of E10B

52 Parts of E10B are -

MR (Multiregister) Main Function of MR is Call ProcessingCall are

set up and released by multiregisters There is Min 2 and Max 6 MR

TR (Translator) Contain Routing Data and Charging Data Routing

Data show that the Call is Local STD or ISD and based on that

Charging Data is used that Charges that Callbased on its Pulse

TX (Taxor) After getting the Charging Data from Translator it

charges the Call Two charging units generate the data required for

invoicing subscribers General or detailed billing is prepared as

required by the subscriber On the basis of the rate applicable to a call

as supplied by the translator the charging unit generates and totals

metering pulses which take into account the date time and charging

mode

BTA time base supplies all the timing signals required by the

exchange

12

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 862

For meter Reading Formula used was

TAXINltEntergt

ND=ltTelephone Nogt

Figure 41 Software used for Bill Enquiry

8

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 962

Figure 42 Software used for Outstanding Bill Enquiry

9

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1062

CHAPTER 5

INTRODUCTION

Digital electronic switch -E10B

The E10B is one of the earliest SPC(Stored Program Control) digital

exchanges in the world They were commissioned first in France

sometime in the mid-eighties

The E10B System is a Large Size Multi Service Digital Electronic

Switching System based on Time Division Switching of Digital Signals

The system is used for serving us Local TAX(Trunk Automatic

Exchange) and Tandem Exchanges E10B capacity is 45000

Connections

51 An E 10 B switching center can be divided into 3 main

blocks

Block 1 Subscriber and circuit connections

Block 2 Time- division switching network

Block 3 Control unit

The operation and maintenance centre constitutes a fourth block which

is shared by a number of switching centers

10

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1162

511 BLOCK 1

Subscriber and circuit connections -The interface with the

subscriber lines is via circuit boards comprising 16 ordinary subscriber

equipments or 8 discriminated subscriber equipments After

concentration the analog signals are sampled and encoded to make up

the outgoing PCM signals There are 2 3 or 4 PCM links to cater for

the overall result obtained by calculating the product number of

subscriber X average traffic per subscriber This provides for

concentrating the traffic on 2 3 or 4 PCM links corresponding to a

maximum configuration of 120 circuits

512 BLOCK 2

Time Division Switching Network- It provides 4 wire switching

between the time slot allocated to the calling party and the time slot

allocated to the called party It is a 3 stage system (time - space-

time)

When the ultimate capacity is reached the E 10 B switching network

can handle 384 PCM systems 16 of which can be allocating to

frequency senderreceiver unit (ETA) The remaining 368 PCM systems

provide 368x30 = 11040time slots catering for 5520 simultaneous

calls

11

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1262

513 BLOCK 3

Control Unit- Switching operation that is carried out in block1 and

block2 are monitored by Control Unit So we can say that it is a

Monitoring Unit of E10B

52 Parts of E10B are -

MR (Multiregister) Main Function of MR is Call ProcessingCall are

set up and released by multiregisters There is Min 2 and Max 6 MR

TR (Translator) Contain Routing Data and Charging Data Routing

Data show that the Call is Local STD or ISD and based on that

Charging Data is used that Charges that Callbased on its Pulse

TX (Taxor) After getting the Charging Data from Translator it

charges the Call Two charging units generate the data required for

invoicing subscribers General or detailed billing is prepared as

required by the subscriber On the basis of the rate applicable to a call

as supplied by the translator the charging unit generates and totals

metering pulses which take into account the date time and charging

mode

BTA time base supplies all the timing signals required by the

exchange

12

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 962

Figure 42 Software used for Outstanding Bill Enquiry

9

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1062

CHAPTER 5

INTRODUCTION

Digital electronic switch -E10B

The E10B is one of the earliest SPC(Stored Program Control) digital

exchanges in the world They were commissioned first in France

sometime in the mid-eighties

The E10B System is a Large Size Multi Service Digital Electronic

Switching System based on Time Division Switching of Digital Signals

The system is used for serving us Local TAX(Trunk Automatic

Exchange) and Tandem Exchanges E10B capacity is 45000

Connections

51 An E 10 B switching center can be divided into 3 main

blocks

Block 1 Subscriber and circuit connections

Block 2 Time- division switching network

Block 3 Control unit

The operation and maintenance centre constitutes a fourth block which

is shared by a number of switching centers

10

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1162

511 BLOCK 1

Subscriber and circuit connections -The interface with the

subscriber lines is via circuit boards comprising 16 ordinary subscriber

equipments or 8 discriminated subscriber equipments After

concentration the analog signals are sampled and encoded to make up

the outgoing PCM signals There are 2 3 or 4 PCM links to cater for

the overall result obtained by calculating the product number of

subscriber X average traffic per subscriber This provides for

concentrating the traffic on 2 3 or 4 PCM links corresponding to a

maximum configuration of 120 circuits

512 BLOCK 2

Time Division Switching Network- It provides 4 wire switching

between the time slot allocated to the calling party and the time slot

allocated to the called party It is a 3 stage system (time - space-

time)

When the ultimate capacity is reached the E 10 B switching network

can handle 384 PCM systems 16 of which can be allocating to

frequency senderreceiver unit (ETA) The remaining 368 PCM systems

provide 368x30 = 11040time slots catering for 5520 simultaneous

calls

11

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1262

513 BLOCK 3

Control Unit- Switching operation that is carried out in block1 and

block2 are monitored by Control Unit So we can say that it is a

Monitoring Unit of E10B

52 Parts of E10B are -

MR (Multiregister) Main Function of MR is Call ProcessingCall are

set up and released by multiregisters There is Min 2 and Max 6 MR

TR (Translator) Contain Routing Data and Charging Data Routing

Data show that the Call is Local STD or ISD and based on that

Charging Data is used that Charges that Callbased on its Pulse

TX (Taxor) After getting the Charging Data from Translator it

charges the Call Two charging units generate the data required for

invoicing subscribers General or detailed billing is prepared as

required by the subscriber On the basis of the rate applicable to a call

as supplied by the translator the charging unit generates and totals

metering pulses which take into account the date time and charging

mode

BTA time base supplies all the timing signals required by the

exchange

12

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1062

CHAPTER 5

INTRODUCTION

Digital electronic switch -E10B

The E10B is one of the earliest SPC(Stored Program Control) digital

exchanges in the world They were commissioned first in France

sometime in the mid-eighties

The E10B System is a Large Size Multi Service Digital Electronic

Switching System based on Time Division Switching of Digital Signals

The system is used for serving us Local TAX(Trunk Automatic

Exchange) and Tandem Exchanges E10B capacity is 45000

Connections

51 An E 10 B switching center can be divided into 3 main

blocks

Block 1 Subscriber and circuit connections

Block 2 Time- division switching network

Block 3 Control unit

The operation and maintenance centre constitutes a fourth block which

is shared by a number of switching centers

10

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1162

511 BLOCK 1

Subscriber and circuit connections -The interface with the

subscriber lines is via circuit boards comprising 16 ordinary subscriber

equipments or 8 discriminated subscriber equipments After

concentration the analog signals are sampled and encoded to make up

the outgoing PCM signals There are 2 3 or 4 PCM links to cater for

the overall result obtained by calculating the product number of

subscriber X average traffic per subscriber This provides for

concentrating the traffic on 2 3 or 4 PCM links corresponding to a

maximum configuration of 120 circuits

512 BLOCK 2

Time Division Switching Network- It provides 4 wire switching

between the time slot allocated to the calling party and the time slot

allocated to the called party It is a 3 stage system (time - space-

time)

When the ultimate capacity is reached the E 10 B switching network

can handle 384 PCM systems 16 of which can be allocating to

frequency senderreceiver unit (ETA) The remaining 368 PCM systems

provide 368x30 = 11040time slots catering for 5520 simultaneous

calls

11

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1262

513 BLOCK 3

Control Unit- Switching operation that is carried out in block1 and

block2 are monitored by Control Unit So we can say that it is a

Monitoring Unit of E10B

52 Parts of E10B are -

MR (Multiregister) Main Function of MR is Call ProcessingCall are

set up and released by multiregisters There is Min 2 and Max 6 MR

TR (Translator) Contain Routing Data and Charging Data Routing

Data show that the Call is Local STD or ISD and based on that

Charging Data is used that Charges that Callbased on its Pulse

TX (Taxor) After getting the Charging Data from Translator it

charges the Call Two charging units generate the data required for

invoicing subscribers General or detailed billing is prepared as

required by the subscriber On the basis of the rate applicable to a call

as supplied by the translator the charging unit generates and totals

metering pulses which take into account the date time and charging

mode

BTA time base supplies all the timing signals required by the

exchange

12

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1162

511 BLOCK 1

Subscriber and circuit connections -The interface with the

subscriber lines is via circuit boards comprising 16 ordinary subscriber

equipments or 8 discriminated subscriber equipments After

concentration the analog signals are sampled and encoded to make up

the outgoing PCM signals There are 2 3 or 4 PCM links to cater for

the overall result obtained by calculating the product number of

subscriber X average traffic per subscriber This provides for

concentrating the traffic on 2 3 or 4 PCM links corresponding to a

maximum configuration of 120 circuits

512 BLOCK 2

Time Division Switching Network- It provides 4 wire switching

between the time slot allocated to the calling party and the time slot

allocated to the called party It is a 3 stage system (time - space-

time)

When the ultimate capacity is reached the E 10 B switching network

can handle 384 PCM systems 16 of which can be allocating to

frequency senderreceiver unit (ETA) The remaining 368 PCM systems

provide 368x30 = 11040time slots catering for 5520 simultaneous

calls

11

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1262

513 BLOCK 3

Control Unit- Switching operation that is carried out in block1 and

block2 are monitored by Control Unit So we can say that it is a

Monitoring Unit of E10B

52 Parts of E10B are -

MR (Multiregister) Main Function of MR is Call ProcessingCall are

set up and released by multiregisters There is Min 2 and Max 6 MR

TR (Translator) Contain Routing Data and Charging Data Routing

Data show that the Call is Local STD or ISD and based on that

Charging Data is used that Charges that Callbased on its Pulse

TX (Taxor) After getting the Charging Data from Translator it

charges the Call Two charging units generate the data required for

invoicing subscribers General or detailed billing is prepared as

required by the subscriber On the basis of the rate applicable to a call

as supplied by the translator the charging unit generates and totals

metering pulses which take into account the date time and charging

mode

BTA time base supplies all the timing signals required by the

exchange

12

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1262

513 BLOCK 3

Control Unit- Switching operation that is carried out in block1 and

block2 are monitored by Control Unit So we can say that it is a

Monitoring Unit of E10B

52 Parts of E10B are -

MR (Multiregister) Main Function of MR is Call ProcessingCall are

set up and released by multiregisters There is Min 2 and Max 6 MR

TR (Translator) Contain Routing Data and Charging Data Routing

Data show that the Call is Local STD or ISD and based on that

Charging Data is used that Charges that Callbased on its Pulse

TX (Taxor) After getting the Charging Data from Translator it

charges the Call Two charging units generate the data required for

invoicing subscribers General or detailed billing is prepared as

required by the subscriber On the basis of the rate applicable to a call

as supplied by the translator the charging unit generates and totals

metering pulses which take into account the date time and charging

mode

BTA time base supplies all the timing signals required by the

exchange

12

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1362

MQ (Marker)Two markers handle the routing of data between the

various units within the exchange Its main function is Data

transmission among the Unit If both MQ fails the whole exchange will

fail

ETA It is a Frequency Sender Tone GeneratorThe frequency sender

and receiver units generate the tones directly in digital form

Teleconferencing facility is also provided by ETA

53 Facilities provided by the E 10 B system

bull Pushbutton telephones

bull Short- code dialing

bull Call transfer

bull Conference calls

bull Automatic alarm calls

54 PRINCIPAL FEATURES OF THE E 10 B SYSTEM

(1) CAPACITY

Number of switchable PCM links384

Processing capacity 190000 BHCA

Traffic handling capacity 4000 erlangs

13

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1462

Transit exchange 11000 circuits

Subscriber exchange 45000 lines amp 5000 circuits

(2) SYSTEM

Time-division switching

Pulse code modulation ( PCM) to CCITT and CEPT standards

bull 2 MbitsPCM links

bull 30 telephone channels per PCM link

bull 8 bit per telephone channel

bull Adaptable to 24- channel PCM links

Stored program control(SPC)

bull Dedication processors for switching functions

bull Non-dedication processor for operation functions

(3) POWER SUPPLY

Exchange and satellite exchange (-)48 V

OMC 220 V 50 Hz

14

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1562

CHAPTER 6

INTRODUCTION

Digital Electronics Switching Exchange- OCB

OCB stands for Optically Controlled Birefringence The OCB 283 CSN

Exchange is a Multiservice Switching System which serves as Local TAX

Tandem International Gateway Exchange and Service Switching Point (SSP)

from Mobile Radio and Intelligent Network (IN)

15

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1662

OCB 283 is the controller part of the exchange which has a distributed

architecture with control station like Main Control Station (SMC)

consisting of Call Processing Data Base Charging Message

Distribution Management of connection etc

The main services are Plain Old Telephone Services (POTS) ISDN

Services Intelligent Network Services Digital Circular Radio Telephone

Services etc

61 MAJOR UNITS OF OCB SYSTEM

Subscriber Connection Unit (CSN) -

A CSN basically consists of 1 Basic Rack and 3 Extension Racks

Capacity of CSN is 5000 max Subs May be analogous and digital

CSNL is for local Subs and CSND for remote Subsbull TABAS-For ordinary sub ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAE-For home metering ndash 16 sub per card

bull TABAN-For ISDN Subs ndash consumes 16 ports

Trunk and Junction Connection Unit(SMT) -

It is the interface between the Switching Network and junctions from

other Exchanges (or remote Sub Connection Unit)

16

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1762

Switching Matrix(SMX) -

It is made up of Host Switching Matrix and Branch Selection and

Amplification FunctionSMX is duplicated

Auxiliary Equipments Control Station(SMA) -

It contains ETA and PUPE ETA consists of Frequency

ReceiverGeneratorConference Call ccts Tone Generators

Control Unit(SMC) -

There are six control unit as under

1 Multiregister (MR) for establishing and releasing of calls

2 Translator (TR) for storing Exchange database

3 Charging Unit (TX) for carrying out charging jobs

4 Marker (MQ) performs connection and disconnection of subs

5 CCS-7 Controller (PC) for carrying out routing 7 traffic

management functions

6 Matric System Handler (GX) for monitoring connection in SN

Operation and Maintenance Unit(SMM) -

17

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1862

It is OMC for supervising function of different units and for taking

suitable actions at the events of faults It uses two identical

Microprocessors Motorola ndash 68030 There are two Magnetic disks each

of capacity 12 GB for various storages One streamer drive of 525 MB

is provided for initialisation and backup etc There are two magnetic

tape drives for transferring charging data for billing etc subsequently

SMM is duplicated

62 Features of OCB -

bull Digital Switching System developed by Ms CIT ALCATEL of

France

bull OMC and SN are duplicated

bull Varieties of services provided are (1) Basic Telephony(2)ISDN

(Integrated Services Digital Network Communication protocols

proposed by telephone companies to permit telephone network

to carry datavoice and other source material)(3)Mobile

(4)Videotext and others

bull It supports different types of signalling systems (1)Decadic

(2)MF(20)(3)CAS(4)CCITT No 7

bull Max no of Jns may be 60000

bull Environment requirement is not very stringent

bull Traffic handling capacity is 8000000 BHCA

18

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 1962

bull Automatic Fault recovery feature and remote monitoring

bull Operating System used is RTOS(Real Time Operating System)

bull Language used is CHILL

bull Only 35 types of cards(excluding CSN)

bull Space requirement is very small

CHAPTER 7

19

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2062

INTRODUCTION

MOBILE SERVICES -

Types of Network access in Mobile -

71 Frequency Division Multiple

Access (FDMA) -

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) is one of the most common

analog multiple access procedures The frequency band is divided into

channels of equal bandwidth such that each conversation is carried out

on different frequency Guard bands are used between adjacent signal

spectra to minimize crosstalk between channels

20

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2162

Figure 71 Frequency Division Multiple Access

72 Time Division Multiple Access

(TDMA) -

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) is a more complex technique for

it needs a highly accurate synchronization between transmitter and

receiver The TDMA technique is used in digital mobile radio systems

The individual mobile stations are cyclically assigned a frequency for

exclusive use only for the duration of a time slot Furthermore in most

cases the whole system bandwidth for a time slot is not assigned to

one station but the system frequency is subdivided into sub bands

and TDMA is used for multiple accesses to each sub band The sub

bands are known as carrier frequencies and the mobile system using

the technique are designated as multiple carrier systems

GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) employs such a

combination of FDMA and TDMA it is a multicarrier TDMA system In

each time slot the mobile station transmits a data burst The period

assigned to a time slot for a mobile station thus also determines the

number of TDMA channels on a carrier frequency The time slots of

one period are combined into a so called TDMA frame

21

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2262

Figure72 Time Division Multiple Access

721 The Advantages of TDMA are -

1 Permits flexible bit rates (ie multiple time slots can be

assigned to a user eg if each time slot translates to 32Kbps

then a 64Kbps user gets assigned 2 slots per frame)

2 Can support bursts or variable bit rate traffic Number of slots

assigned to a user can be changed frame by frame (eg 2 slots

in frame 1 3 slots in frame 2 1 slot in frame 3 0 slots in frame

4 etc)

3 No guard bands required for wideband system

4 No narrowband filters required for wideband system

722 The Disadvantages of TDMA are -

22

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2362

1 The high bit rates of wideband systems require complex

equalization

2 Because of burst mode of operation a large number of overhead

bits for synchronization and framing are required

3 Guard time is required in each slot to accommodate time

inaccuracies because of clock instability

4 Electronics operating at high bit rates increase power

consumption

5 Complex signal processing is required for synchronize within a

short slot time

Figure 73 Combination of TDMA and FDMA

73 Code Division Multiple Access

(CDMA) -

Code Division Multiple Access system is very different from time and

frequency division multiplexing In this system a particular user has

23

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2462

access to the entire bandwidth for the entire time duration The basic

principle of CDMA is that different codes are used to distinguish

between the different users Typically used forms of modulation are

Direct Sequence spread spectrum (DS-CDMA) frequency hopping or

Joint Detection CDMA (JDCDMA) Here a signal is generated that

spreads out over a wide bandwidth A code known as a spreading code

is used to perform this action By using a group of codes which are

orthogonal to each other it is possible to pick out a signal with a given

code in the presence of many other signals with different orthogonal

codes In fact many different baseband signals with 6 different

spreading codes can be modulated onto the same carrier to enable

many different users to be supported By using different orthogonal

codes interference between the signals is minimal Conversely when

signals are received from several mobile stations the base station is

able to isolate each one as they have different orthogonal spreading

codes

CDMA has a-Spectrum of-4507008009001700180019002100

MHz

Channel Bandwidth of 125 MHz

731 The Advantages of CDMA are -

1 CDMA has a soft capacity The more the number of codes more

the number of users

24

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2562

2 CDMA requires tight power control as it suffers for far-near

effect In other words a user close to the base station

transmitting with the same power as a user farther away will

drown the latterrsquos signal All signals must have more or less

equal power at the receiver

3 Rake receivers can be used to improve signal reception Time

delayed versions (a chip or more delayed) of the signal(multipath signals) can be collected and used to make bit level

decisions

4 Mobiles can switch base stations without switching carriers Two

base stations receive the mobile signal and the mobile is

receiving from two base stations

732 The Disadvantages of CDMA are -

1 The code length has to be carefully selected A large code length

can induce delay or even cause interference

2 Time synchronization is necessary

3 Soft handoff increases use of radio resources and hence can

reduce capacity

4 As the sum of the power received at and transmitted from a

base station has to constant a tight power control is needed

This can result in more handoffs

25

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2662

Figure 74 Code Division Multiple Access

74 Leased line

To transmit data between computer and electronic information

devices BSNL provides data communication services to its

subscribers It offers a choice of high medium and low speed leased

data circuits as well as dial-up lines Bandwidth is available on

demand in most of the cities Managed leased Line Network (MLLN)

offers flexibility of providing circuits with speeds of n x 64 Kbps up to

2 Mbps

Leased circuits are provided to subscribers for internal communication

between their officesfactories at various sites within a citytown or

different citiestown on point to point basis or on a network basis

interconnecting the various sites

26

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2762

741 Services provided by leased line -

1 Speech circuits

2 Data circuits

a Point to point data circuit

b Private data network

c Closed user group

3 Telegraph and tele ndash printer circuits

4 International leased circuit

742 Managed Leased Line Service (MLLN)

The MLLN is a Managed Leased Line Network system which is proposed

to provide Leased line connectivity The State-of-the-art technology

equipment MLLN is designed mainly for having effective control

monitor on the leased line so that the down time is very much

minimized

27

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2862

CHAPTER 8

INTRODUCTION

BROADBAND

The Broadband service is based on DSL technology (on the same

copper cable that is used for connecting telephone) countrywide

spanning 198 cities BSNL has commissioned a world class multi-

gigabit multi-protocol convergent IP infrastructure through National

Internet Backbone-II (NIB-II)

The services includes always-on broadband access to the Internet for

residential and business customers Content based services Video

multicasting Video-on-demand and Interactive gaming Audio and

Video conferencing IP Telephony Distance learning Messaging plain

and feature rich Multi-site MPLS VPNs with Quality of Service (QoS)

guarantees The subscriber accesses the above services through

Subscriber Service Selection System (SSSS) portal

28

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 2962

BROADBAND is a form of internet service The only difference

between broadband and internet is the speed We receive broadband

and caller facility on the same copper wire with the help of a

SPLITTER which is a kind of low pass filter which separates a normal

call from the broadband data BSNL provides a staggering speed of 2

MBPS which is the fastest in India

Since we require less uploading compared to downloading so

broadband provides higher bandwidth and speed for downlink as

compared to uplink to suit our necessity Since the uplink and

downlink speed and bandwidth is different so a process called ADSL is

used

ADSL stands for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line It is a technology

that allows copper telephone pairs to be used to provide a broadband

connection It provides lsquoalways-onrsquo Internet connection that is

automatically established once the PC and ADSL modem are switched

on and instant log-in procedure is completed

lsquoAlways-Onrsquo means that the broadband sets up a permanent

connection to the Internet that lets you access the Internet as soon as

you switch on the computer and the CPE and do an instant log-in with

your user name and password There will be no separate Internet

telephone call charges

81 Benefits of ADSL

bull Fast downloads

bull At least 45 times and upto 35 times faster than dial-up

29

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3062

connection

bull Always on connection

bull Telephone and Internet access can be used together

bull No telephone call charges for internet surfing

bull Cost effective way to access Internet

bull A host of free content on the web can be downloaded faster

82 Main Objectives of Broadband are -

bull To provide high speed Internet connectivity (upto 8 Mbps)

bull To provide Virtual Private Network (VPN) service to the

broadband customers

bull To provide dial VPN service to MPLS VPN customers

bull To provide multicast video services video-on-demand etc

through the Broadband Remote Access Server (BRAS)

bull To provide a means to bill for the aforesaid services by either

time-based or volume-based billing It shall provide the

customer with the option to select the services through web

server

bull To provide both pre-paid and post paid broadband services

83 Services available through Broadband -

bull High speed Internet Access This is the always-on

Internet access service with speed ranging from 256 kbps to 8

Mbps

30

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3162

bull Bandwidth on Demand This facilitates customer to

change bandwidth as per his her requirement For example a

customer with 256 kbps can change to 1 Mbps during the video

Conferencing session

bull Multicasting This provides video multicast services for

application in distance education telemedicine etc

bull Dial VPN Service This service allows remote users to

access their private network securely over the NIB-II

infrastructure

bull Video and Audio Conferencing

bull Content based Services Like Video on Demand

Interactive Gaming Live and time shifted TV

31

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3262

Figure 81 Front Screen for Broadband Connection

CHAPTER 9

INTRODUCTION

32

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3362

GSM

GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open digital

cellular technology used for transmitting mobile voice and data

services GSM differs from first generation wireless systems in that it

uses digital technology and time division multiple access transmission

methods

GSM is a circuit-switched system that divides each 200 kHz channel

into eight 25 kHz time-slots GSM operates in the 900MHz and 18GHz

bands in Europe and the 19GHz and 850MHz bands in the US The

850MHz band is also used for GSM and 3GSM in Australia Canada and

many South American countries

GSM supports data transfer speeds of up to 96 kbits allowing the

transmission of basic data services such as SMS (Short Message

Service) Another major benefit is its international roaming capability

allowing users to access the same services when travelling abroad as

at home This gives consumers seamless and same number

connectivity in more than 210 countries GSM satellite roaming has

also extended service access to areas where terrestrial coverage is not

available

91 GSM Interfaces -

33

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3462

II A - Interface

This is the interface within the GSM network architecture between the

BSS (Base Station Subsystem) and an MSC (Mobile Switching Centre)

The interface supports standard 64Kbps channels for signalling and

traffic The primary protocols on this interface are DTAP (Direct

Transfer Application Part) and BSSMAP (Base Station Subsystem

Management Application Part)

Figure 91 A - Interface

III Abis ndash Interface

The interface within the GSM architecture between the BTS (Base Transceiver

Station) and BSC (Base Station Controller) This interface is usually configured

using a 16Kbps slot structure

34

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3562

Figure 92 Abis Interface

Air ndash Interface (UM Interface)Interface between MS to BTS

B ndash Interface

Interface between MSC to VLR

C- Interface

Interface between HLR to MSC

D-Interface

Interface between HLR to VLR

35

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3662

E-Interface

Interface between MSC to MSC

F-Interface

Interface between MSC to EIR

G-InterfaceInterface between VLR to VLR

H-Interface

Interface between HLR to AUC

Figure 93 Mobile Tower having Antenna

36

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3762

Figure 94 GSM Architecture along with Interfaces

92 Architecture of the GSM network

The GSM network can be divided into four main parts

bull The Mobile Station (MS)

bull The Base Station Subsystem (BSS)

bull The Network and Switching Subsystem (NSS)

bull The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

921 Mobile Station

A Mobile Station consists of two main elements

37

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3862

bull The mobile equipment or terminal

bull The Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Figure 95 Mobile Equipment and SIM

The Terminal

There are different types of terminals distinguished principally by their

power and application

bull The `fixed terminals are the ones installed in cars Their

maximum allowed output power is 20 W

bull The GSM portable terminals can also be installed in vehicles

Their maximum allowed output power is 8W

bull The handhels terminals have experienced the biggest success

thanks to thei weight and volume which are continuously

decreasing These terminals can emit up to 2 W The evolution of

technologies allows to decrease the maximum allowed power to

08 W

38

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 3962

The SIM

The SIM is a smart card that identifies the terminal By inserting the

SIM card into the terminal the user can have access to all the

subscribed services Without the SIM card the terminal is not

operational

Another advantage of the SIM card is the mobility of the users In fact

the only element that personalizes a terminal is the SIM card

922 The Base Station Subsystem

The BSS connects the Mobile Station and the NSS It is in charge of

the transmission and reception The BSS can be divided into two parts

bull The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) or Base Station

bull The Base Station Controller (BSC)

9221 The Base Transceiver Station

The BTS corresponds to the transceivers and antennas used in

each cell of the network A BTS is usually placed in the center of a cell

Its transmitting power defines the size of a cell Each BTS has between

one and sixteen transceivers depending on the density of users in the

cell

39

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4062

40

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4162

Figure96 Picture of BTS

9222 The Base Station Controller

The BSC controls a group of BTS and manages their radio ressources

A BSC is principally in charge of handovers frequency hopping

exchange functions and control of the radio frequency power levels of

the BTSs

41

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4262

Figure 97 Picture of BSC

42

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4362

923 The Network and Switching Subsystem

Its main role is to manage the communications between the mobile

users and other users such as mobile users ISDN users fixed

telephony users etc It also includes data bases needed in order to

store information about the subscribers and to manage their mobility

The different components of the NSS are described below

92 31 The Mobile services Switching Center (MSC)

It is the central component of the NSS The MSC

performs the switching functions of the network It also provides

connection to other networks

9232 The Gateway Mobile services Switching Center

(GMSC)

A gateway is a node interconnecting two networks The GMSC is the

interface between the mobile cellular network and the PSTN It is in

charge of routing calls from the fixed network towards a GSM user

The GMSC is often implemented in the same machines as the MSC

92 33 Home location register (HLR)

HLR stores information of subscriber belonging to the covering area of

MSC It also stores the current location of these subscribers and the

service to which they have access

43

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4462

9234 Visitor location register (VLR)

VLR contains information from subscriberrsquos HLR necessary in order to

provide the subscribed services to visiting users

VLR is always implemented together with a MSC soothe area under

control of the MSC is also the area under control of the VLR

9235 Authentication center (AUC)

AUC register is used for security purpose It helps to verify the userrsquos

identity

9236 Equipment identity register (EIR )

EIR contains a list of all valid terminals The EIR allows the forbid calls

from stolen or unauthorized terminals

92 37 The GSM Interworking Unit (GIWU)

The GIWU corresponds to an interface to various networks for data

communications During these communications the transmission of

speech and data can be alternated

924 The Operation and Support Subsystem (OSS)

The OSS is connected to the different components of the NSS and to

the BSC in order to control and monitor the GSM system It is also in

charge of controlling the traffic load of the BSS

44

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4562

Figure 98 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF MOBILE TOWER AND

TRANSMISSION

93 The GSM functions

In this paragraph the description of the GSM network is focused on

the differents functions to fulfil by the network and not on its physical

components In GSM five main functions can be defined

bull Transmission

bull Radio Resources management (RR)

bull Mobility Management (MM)

bull Communication Management (CM)

bull Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

45

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4662

94 GSM Frequencies

In principle the GSM system can be implemented in any frequency

band However there are several bands where GSM terminals are or

will shortly be available Furthermore GSM terminals may incorporate

one or more of the GSM frequency bands listed below to facilitate

roaming on a global basis

Frequency Range

GSM400 4504 - 4576 MHz paired with 4604 - 4676

MHz

or

4788 - 486 MHz paired with 4888 - 496 MHz

GSM 850 824 - 849 MHz paired with 869 - 894 MHz

GSM900 880 - 915 MHz paired with 925 - 960 MHz

GSM1800 1710 - 1785 MHz paired with 1805 - 1880 MHz

GSM1900 1850 - 1910 MHz paired with 1930 - 1990 MHz

95 Frequency allocation

Two frequency bands of 25 Mhz each one have been allocated for the

GSM system

bull The band 890-915 Mhz has been allocated for the uplink

direction (transmitting from the mobile station to the base

station)

46

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4762

bull The band 935-960 Mhz has been allocated for the downlink

direction (transmitting from the base station to the mobile

station)

But not all the countries can use the whole GSM frequency bands

This is due principally to military reasons and to the existence of

previous analog systems using part of the two 25 Mhz frequency

bands

Traffic is measured in ERLANG

BSC Capacity is 1min 5000 ERLANG

Now in 3G in respect of BSC MSC

RNC(Radio Network Control) is used

CHAPTER 10

47

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4862

INTRODUCTION

MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME (MDF)

The main distribution frame acts as a link between the

exchange indoor and the exchange outdoor It not only

connects the exchange with the subscriber but also protects

the exchange from environmental hazards such as lightning

strike

There are two sides in a MDF -

101 Line side - The line side belongs to the outdoor The

subscriber is connected to the exchange via the MDF In the

line side there are analog connections

This side of the exchange consists of verticals Each vertical

has 100 trans and receive pairs connected to it ie 100

subscribers are connected to the exchange via one vertical

Each vertical corresponds to a particular pillar The line wires

emanating from the verticals are connected to a cabinet

from where it is taken to a pillar which then is connected to

48

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 4962

a distribution pole (DP) From here the lines are distributed

to the subscribers

For line testing on the line side the dial tone is tested on the

vertical first If it is found to be ok then the testing is carried

forward to the cabinet From here line wires are carried

forward in a cluster of around 100 pairs to the pillar A pillar

is usually located in the central part of an area where the

pillar is established so that distribution is convenient and

less expensive One distribution pole is set up to provide

connection to around 15 to 20 homes From here the

subscribers are directly connected

102 Exchange side - Exchange side belongs to the

exchange On the exchange side of the MDF the connections

are DigitalThe connection between the

exchange and the subscriber is made in various stages On

the exchange side the MDF is directly connected to the DLU

in the SN (Switching Network) In the MDF the two sides

49

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5062

are connected through a jumper wire The line testing for

the exchange is done first here using a dial tone checker

For rectifying errors each subscriber is assigned an

Equipment Number (NE) This number is the identification

mark of the subscriber for the exchange It represents the

location in the DLU from where the connection is provided

The DLU is then connected to the LTG (Line Trunk Groups)

from here the switching network is connected

CHAPTER 11

50

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5162

INTRODUCTION

THE POWER PLANT

Power Plant is the main part of an Exchange It provide uninterrupted

power to the exchange continuously it also plays the role of converting

AC power to DC power

The arrangement made has one active and two standby systems for

supplying power This makes the system extremely reliable even in the

areas with acute power shortage Options like maintenance free

batteries (VRLA) also make it cost effective

There are three supply options in the power plant

bull The AC mains

bull The Value Regulated Lead Acid battery set

bull The engine alternator

111 The AC Mains

The exchange requires a constant supply voltage of 48V (DC) in the

running condition So the voltage obtained from which is 66 KV needs

51

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5262

to be stepped down and rectified to DC voltage This function is

performed by the float rectifier unit

112 The Battery Set

There are two sets of VRLA batteries which are maintenance free

batteries Each set is capable of providing the required 48V DC supply

and have a capacity of 4000 AH (Ampere Hour) They are named as

set A and set B One set is active while the other set is available for

standby In case AC mains power is on both the sets of batteries get

charged As soon as there is a power cut the load gets switched over

to the battery set and one of the sets gets active while the other is

available for standby But even this source cannot be trusted for very

long durations as each set is capable of sustaining the load only for

about 3 hours So we need another alternative to provide a fool proof

system This calls for the use of the engine alternator

1113 The Engine Alternator

Usually the battery set is always kept for standby operation In case

there is a power cut the battery set operates hardly for 5 to 10

minutes which is the time taken for the alternator to start

There are also two sets of generators which are rated as follows

bull 66 KV415V voltage rating with moisture absorber

bull 200 KVA power rating

52

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5362

CHAPTER 12

INTRODUCTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TERMINAL

On the basis of Operation and maintenance terminal Function it has

been grouped into following categories

121 OPERATING FUNCTIONS

1 Charging function

2 Continuous connectivity management

3 Memory management of Translator

122 SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

1 Circuit tests

2 Line and subscriber set tests

3 Load and traffic observation

123 MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS

1 Maintenance of exchange control unit memories

2 Fault location and trouble-shooting aid function

3 Telephone equipment position

53

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5462

CHAPTER 13

INTRODUCTION

PULSE CODE MODULATION

PCM is a process which converts a continuous analog signal into digital

signals It is a Multichannel transmission technique that explores the

advantage of digital transmission over analog transmission It only

realizes the advantages of improved transmission limits greater noise

immunity lesser distortion of dial pulses but also economy

Converting continuous analog signal into digital signals is

carried out in three stages-

131 Sampling- Sampling is a periodical

measurement of the value of the analog signal A sampled

data contains all the information of the signal if the

sampling frequency is at least twice the highest frequency

of the signal to be sampled As the signals in telephony are

band limited to 300-3400Hz a sampling are frequency of

8000Hz ie every 125 micro seconds is sufficient

54

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5562

132 Quantizing - representation of their amplitude is forced to

take certain value To ensure that the ratio between signal amplitude

and errors introduced by quantized and encoded (companding) law is

applied

133 Encoding - PAM signals are quantized and encoded into 8

bit symmetrical binary code and transmitted on line during the time

slot allotted to that channel as PCM signals

At the receive side these PCM signals are decoded into PAM

signals and smoothed out by passing through low-pass filters to filters

to get back originals signals

This PCM system can support 30 simultaneous telephone conversation

and optionally 8 telegraphteleprinter channels on one line Individual

channels have a transmission speed of 64 Kbitss and the total

transmission rate for all 32 channels in the system is 2048 Kbitss

55

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5662

CHAPTER 14

INTRODUCTION

SWITCHING

There are two types of switching namely CIRCUIT Switching and

PACKET Switching

141 CIRCUIT SWITCHING - A circuit switching network is onethat establishes a dedicated circuit between nodes and terminals

before the users may communicate Each circuit that is dedicated

cannot be used by other callers until the circuit is released and a new

connection is set up Even if no actual communication is taking place in

a dedicated circuit then that channel still remains unavailable to other

users Channels that are available for new calls to be set up are said to

be idle Early telephone exchanges are a suitable example of circuitswitching

142 PACKET SWITCHING - Packet switching is a

communications paradigm in which packets are routed between nodes

over data links shared with other traffic This contrasts with the other

56

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5762

principal paradigm circuit switching which sets up a dedicated

connection between the two nodes for their exclusive use for the

duration of the communication Packet switching is used to optimize

the use of the channel capacity available in a network to minimize the

transmission latency (ie the time it takes for data to pass across the

network) and to increase robustness of communication

143 Circuit Switching vs Packet

Switching

In principle circuit switching and packet switching both are used in

high-capacity networks In circuit-switched networks network

resources are static set in ldquocopperrdquo if you will from the sender to

receiver before the start of the transfer thus creating a ldquocircuitrdquo The

resources remain dedicated to the circuit during the entire transfer and

the entire message follows the same path In packet-switched

networks the message is broken into packets each of which can take

a different route to the destination where the packets are recompiled

into the original message Circuit switching contrasts with packet

switching which splits traffic data (for instance digital representation

of sound or computer data) into chunks called packets that are

routed over a shared network Packet switching networks do not

require a circuit to be established and allow many pairs of nodes to

communicate almost simultaneously over the same channel Each

57

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5862

packet is individually addressed precluding the need for a dedicated

path to help the packet find its way to its destination

CHAPTER 15

CONCLUSION

This Practical Training has given me an opportunity to know about various

technologies working behind in todayrsquos advanced world of telecommunication

All those that we read in our Book only theoretically by this training I observe all

those practically I come across different units in telecom exchange like

E10BOCBEWSD Mobile (GSM) BSC and BTS MDF and Power Plant

and Broadband I not only watch those equipment but also know about those

there working there functions and also how by work to provide us facility of

telecomI am very grateful to those persons who helped directly amp

indirectly in the successful completion of this practical training and this will

surely be fruitful in future

58

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 5962

CHAPTER 16

APPENDIX

161 Loading statement of Jamshedpur OCB-283Capacity of the TAXndash22K Loading ndash 5915

Station IC OG Between Total PCM

Arra Nil Nil 30 1

Ambala Nil Nil 30 1

Bangalore Nil Nil 61 2

Bhagalpur Nil Nil 60 2

Chennai Nil Nil 30 1

Cuttack Nil Nil 184 6

Daltengung Nil Nil 30 1

Darbhanga Nil Nil 60 2

Delhi bsnl Nil Nil 122 4Delhi mtnl Nil Nil 91 3

Dhanbad Nil Nil 122 4

Dumka Nil Nil 30 1

Ericson1 Nil Nil 494 16

Ericson2 Ni Nil 122 4

Gaya Nil Nil 61 2

Hajipur Nil Nil 30 1

Hazaribag Nil Nil 91 3

Hyderabad Nil Nil 123 4

Kolkata Nil Nil 246 8

Kharagpur Nil Nil 91 3

Katihar Nil Nil 30 1

Lucknow Nil Nil 90 3

Mumbai bsnl Nil Nil 61 2

Mumbai mtnl Nil Nil 62 2

59

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6062

Munger Nil Nil 30 1

Muzafferpur Nil Nil 61 2

Nortel Nil Nil 587 19

Purulia Nil Nil 61 2

Patna Nil Nil 151 5

Patliputr Nil Nil 122 8

Raurkela Nil Nil 91 3

Ranchi 15 45 680 24

Sasaram Nil Nil 30 1

Saharsa Nil Nil 30 1Sakla Nil Nil 153 5

Sambalpur Nil Nil 30 1

Tarang Nil Nil 154 5

Baripada Nil Nil 60 2

MSCA Nil Nil 309 10

Msc bokaro Nil Nil 618 20

Total 15 45 5518 182

162 OCB ndash 283 MAIN TELEPHONE EXCHANGES

EXCHANGE CAPACITY PCM

Main Exchange 12k -

Rsu Telco 11256 15

Rsu Adityapur 3k -

Rsu Sidhgora 4k 12

Rsu Mani fit 4256k 11

Rsu Govindpur 2k 10

Rsu Tatanagar 4256k 14

Rsu Parsudih 4k 11

Dlcjsr 6rt -Dlc Parsudih 2rt -

DlcTelco 1rt -

RsuKharkai 1k -

Ghatsila 6585 12

Bahragora 6594 3

Chaibasa 6582 12

60

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6162

Chakardharpur 6587 5

Manoharpur 6593 2

Saraikela 6597 7

Chandil 6591 -

Jhinkpani 6589 -

Jagannathpur 6588 -

Giriburu 6596 4

Nowamundi 6596 5

Kharzwara 6583 -

163 PHONE CODES AND THEIR EXCHANGE CODE

61

PHONE CODE EXCHANGE

2758 JSR

2756 JSR

2421 JSR

243 JSR

244 JSR

248 JSR

222 JSR223 JSR

265 SNK

240 ADR

220 ADR

2370-3 ADR

2380-3 ADR

2386-87 GMR

246 amp 236 MNG

29 7 DIGIT WJSR

2270 GVP2277 GVP

2290-95 TAT

2296 PSD

230-231 KDM

234 GOL

226228 TLC

221 SDG

232 LIC

2249 KHL

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262

8142019 Dipti Report

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulldipti-report 6262